{"title":"Wooden workbench","description":"\u003cp\u003eKrollit wooden workbenches include 40 professional models from €108 to €1,056. The range includes Güde solutions for workshops and garages, plus Bernardo carpentry benches for artisan workshops and vocational schools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach bench features solid rubberwood or certified 38 mm beech tops. Load capacities range from 150 kg for folding models up to 400 kg for the P 1200 professional series. Welded steel structures, full-extension drawers with ball-bearing slides, and safety locks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been distributing professional equipment since 2007 to over 10,000 customers in Italy and Europe. Each bench includes complete technical documentation, manufacturer's warranty, and dedicated assistance for spare parts and maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"banchi-da-falegname-wb-1500-hobby","title":"Bernardo WB 1500 Hobby workbench – solid unsteamed beech wood, dimensions 1,500 × 650 mm, working height 845 mm, weight 43 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 1500 Hobby woodworking bench is made of solid, non-steamed wood with overall dimensions of 1,500 × 650 mm. Panel thickness is 30 mm, and working height is 845 mm. It is equipped with front and rear vises with a trapezoidal threaded spindle, including 4 round bench dogs, and has Ø 19 mm holes for inserting the dogs. The opening width of the front\/rear vises is 140 \/ 140 mm. Weight is 43 kg. Suitable for wood hobbyists with a home workshop, DIY artisans' garages, and schools with technology labs. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e Solid, non-steamed beech wood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOverall dimensions (with vises):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,500 × 650 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePanel thickness:\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 845 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVises:\u003c\/strong\u003e Front and rear with trapezoidal threaded spindle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBench dogs included:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 (short)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHoles for bench dogs:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 19 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 43 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WB 1500 Hobby and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 1500 Hobby is a solid beech wood workbench for manual woodworking. Overall dimensions are 1,500 × 650 mm, with a working height of 845 mm (ergonomic standard for standing operators). Construction features: 30 mm thick solid beech wood panels, reinforced structure with adjustable threaded rods in the base to compensate for uneven floors, galvanized beech bolts for resistance to deformation caused by humidity. The WB 1500 Hobby model is for advanced hobby use: untreated top (for customization with protective oils or varnishes of choice), front and rear vises with trapezoidal threaded spindle, 4 round bench dogs included. Lower shelf included for order and practicality in a home workshop. Suitable for wood hobbyists with a home workshop, DIY artisans' garages, and schools with technology labs. In Krollit customer workshops, WB benches are chosen by wood hobbyists, artisan joineries, vocational schools, and home DIY workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB workbench range is organized into 3 models: WB 1500 Hobby (1,500 mm, 43 kg) compact for home workshops; WB 2000 Hobby (2,000 mm, 52 kg) standard for advanced hobbyists with adequate space; WB 2100 Profi (2,120 mm, 73 kg) professional in steamed red beech with an oiled surface, designed for under-bench cabinets.\n\nHobby models: WB 1500 and WB 2000 share construction features (untreated beech wood, 30 mm thickness, 140\/140 mm vises, 845 mm working height). Difference: total length (1,500 mm vs 2,000 mm) and weight (43 vs 52 kg). WB 1500 sized for compact workshops; WB 2000 for workshops with space for larger pieces. For daily professional use, consider the WB 2100 Profi (steamed red beech, oiled surface, 40 mm thickness, wider vises).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics and Krollit support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). The WB 1500 Hobby workbench is shipped on a pallet, weighing 43 kg. Assembly requires 30-60 minutes with standard hand tools (wrenches, screwdrivers). Additional bench dogs, replacement accessories (vises, spindles, shelves) original Bernardo are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the WB 1500 Hobby is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWood hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions and price sized for advanced hobby use. 30 mm thickness, 140\/140 mm vises, lower shelf included for home workshop.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSchool with technology lab\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEconomical yet robust workbench for occasional school use. Customizable with protective oils or varnishes of the institution's choice.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan joinery with occasional use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor daily professional use, consider WB 2100 Profi (steamed red beech, oiled surface, 40 mm thickness). Hobby models are sized for non-intensive use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e professional joineries with intensive daily use (the WB 2100 Profi is correctly sized); very humid environments (the untreated top can absorb moisture: apply protective oils or varnishes before use); operations requiring very wide vises beyond 140 mm (the WB 2100 Profi with 210\/180 mm vises is the correct choice).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWood type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid non-steamed beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePanel thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSurface treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUntreated (customizable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (with vises)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,500 × 650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without vises\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,340 × 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e845 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eClamping system\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVises\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront and rear with trapezoidal threaded spindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVise opening width (front \/ rear)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 \/ 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound bench dogs included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (short)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole for dogs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWeight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 43 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo WB 1500 Hobby workbench\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 short round bench dogs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLower shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and assembly manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the workbench come assembled or disassembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbench is shipped disassembled to optimize transport volume. Assembly requires 30-60 minutes with standard hand tools (wrenches, screwdrivers, possibly a rubber mallet for some joints). Assembly instructions are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdjustable threaded rods in the base allow for compensation of floor irregularities after assembly (±20 mm): important for stability during operations with hammers or lateral pressure on the vises. For professional assembly, Krollit can provide telephone guidance during installation. For commercial environments requiring professional installation, contact Krollit sales.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the top already painted or oiled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor Hobby models, the top is untreated (raw wood) to allow for customization with protective oils, varnishes, or waxes of the user's choice. For the WB 2100 Profi model, the top is factory-oiled (food-grade wood oil).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended oil for workbench tops: specific wood oils with resistance to moisture and stains (e.g., boiled linseed oil, hardwax oil, specific workbench oils). Oiling should be repeated every 6-12 months depending on the intensity of use. Alternatively, for intensive professional use, transparent polyurethane varnishes can be applied, which offer greater mechanical resistance but alter the natural appearance of the wood.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eAre the 4 (short) bench dogs sufficient?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor standard use, yes. 4 (short) allow for clamping typical workpieces (lengths up to the limit of the bench). For very specific pieces or operations requiring multiple clamping positions, additional dogs are available in the Bernardo accessories catalog.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench dogs are inserted into the Ø 19 mm holes in the top and are locked by the pressure of the vises. To optimize clamping, the following are available: short dogs (for thin pieces), long dogs (for tall pieces), special dogs with iron jaws (for metal pieces), quick-release lever dogs (for frequent workpiece changes). All dogs are compatible with the standard Ø 19 mm holes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I also use the workbench for metalworking?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but with caution. The workbench is designed for woodworking: for use with metal (e.g., filing, manual sawing of light profiles) it is manageable, but for operations that generate sparks (welding) or require a lot of force (drilling heavy metals), the wooden top can be damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor mixed wood + metal work, a dedicated area on the bench with a sacrificial metal top (steel sheet) over the wooden top is recommended to protect it. For exclusively metal work, consider machinist benches with a dedicated steel top. For blacksmiths with mixed needs, consider special configurations with a metal top inserted into the wooden bench (custom fabrication).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the working height adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe working height of 845 mm is fixed, sized for average height operators (170-180 cm) standing. Adjustable threaded rods in the base allow for compensation of floor irregularities (±20 mm) but not adjustment of the usable height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor operators of non-standard height (below 165 cm or above 190 cm) or for prolonged sitting use, a raised platform or adjustable stool are common accessories. For educational environments with users of different heights, the presence of modular platforms is recommended. Benches with hydraulic or pneumatic height adjustment are available in the Bernardo catalog as dedicated professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693287608648,"sku":"14-2273","price":414.81,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_WB_1500_Hobby_con_morse_e_mensola.jpg?v=1755706033"},{"product_id":"banchi-da-falegname-wb-2000-hobby","title":"Bernardo WB 2000 Hobby Workbench – solid, unsteamed beech wood, dimensions 2,000 × 650 mm, working height 845 mm, weight 52 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 2000 Hobby workbench is made of solid, non-steamed wood with overall dimensions of 2,000 × 650 mm. Panel thickness 30 mm, working height 845 mm. Equipped with front and rear vises with trapezoidal threaded spindle, 4 round bench dogs included, Ø 19 mm holes for dog insertion. Front\/rear vise opening width 140 \/ 140 mm. Weight 52 kg. Suitable for woodworking hobbyists with adequate space, artisanal carpentry shops with occasional use, and schools with technology workshops. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e Solid, non-steamed beech wood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOverall dimensions (with vises):\u003c\/strong\u003e 2,000 × 650 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePanel thickness:\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 845 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVises:\u003c\/strong\u003e Front and rear with trapezoidal threaded spindle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBench dogs included:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 (short)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBench dog holes:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 19 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 52 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WB 2000 Hobby and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 2000 Hobby is a solid beech wood workbench for manual woodworking. Overall dimensions 2,000 × 650 mm, working height 845 mm (ergonomic standard for standing operators). Construction features: 30 mm thick solid beech wood panels, reinforced structure with adjustable threaded rods in the pedestal to compensate for floor irregularities, galvanized beech bolts for resistance to deformation caused by humidity. The WB 2000 Hobby model is for advanced hobby use: untreated top (for customization with oils or protective varnishes of choice), front and rear vises with trapezoidal threaded spindle, 4 round bench dogs included. Lower shelf included for organization and convenience in a home workshop. Suitable for woodworking hobbyists with a home workshop, DIY artisan garages, and schools with technology workshops. In Krollit customer workshops, WB benches are chosen by woodworking hobbyists, artisanal carpentry shops, vocational schools, and home DIY workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB workbench range is organized into 3 models: WB 1500 Hobby (1,500 mm, 43 kg) compact for home workshop; WB 2000 Hobby (2,000 mm, 52 kg) standard for advanced hobbyists with adequate space; WB 2100 Profi (2,120 mm, 73 kg) professional in steamed red beech with oiled surface, prepared for under-bench cabinets. \n\nHobby models: WB 1500 and WB 2000 share construction features (untreated beech wood, 30 mm thickness, 140\/140 mm vises, 845 mm working height). Difference: total length (1,500 mm vs 2,000 mm) and weight (43 vs 52 kg). WB 1500 sized for compact workshops; WB 2000 for workshops with space for larger pieces. For daily professional use, consider the WB 2100 Profi (steamed red beech, oiled surface, 40 mm thickness, wider vises).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). The WB 2000 Hobby bench is shipped on a pallet, weighing 52 kg. Assembly requires 30-60 minutes with standard hand tools (wrenches, screwdrivers). Additional bench dogs, replacement accessories (vises, spindles, shelves) original Bernardo available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the WB 2000 Hobby is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWoodworking hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions and price sized for advanced hobby use. 30 mm thickness, 140\/140 mm vises, lower shelf included for home workshop.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSchool with technology workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEconomical but robust bench for occasional school use. Customizable with oils or protective varnishes at the institution's discretion.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisanal carpentry shop with occasional use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor daily professional use, consider the WB 2100 Profi (steamed red beech, oiled surface, 40 mm thickness). Hobby models are sized for non-intensive use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e professional carpentry shops with intensive daily use (the WB 2100 Profi is correctly sized); very humid environments (the untreated top can absorb humidity: apply oils or protective varnishes before use); work requiring very wide vises beyond 140 mm (the WB 2100 Profi with 210\/180 mm vises is the correct choice).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWood type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid, non-steamed beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePanel thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSurface treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUntreated (customizable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (with vises)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2,000 × 650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without vises\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,840 × 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e845 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eClamping system\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVises\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront and rear with trapezoidal threaded spindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVise opening width (front \/ rear)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 \/ 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound bench dogs included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (short)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHoles for dogs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWeight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 52 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo WB 2000 Hobby workbench\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 short round bench dogs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLower shelf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and assembly manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the workbench arrive assembled or unassembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbench is shipped unassembled to optimize transport volume. Assembly requires 30-60 minutes with standard hand tools (wrenches, screwdrivers, possibly a rubber mallet for some joints). Assembly instructions are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable threaded rods in the pedestal allow for compensation of floor irregularities after assembly: important for stability during work with hammers or lateral pressure on the vises. For professional assembly, Krollit can provide telephone guidance during installation. For commercial environments requiring professional installation, contact Krollit sales.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the top already varnished or oiled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor Hobby models, the top is untreated (raw wood) to allow for customization with oils, varnishes, or protective waxes of the user's choice. For the WB 2100 Profi model, the top is factory-oiled (food-compatible wood oil).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended oil for workbench tops: specific wood oils resistant to moisture and stains (e.g., boiled linseed oil, dura oil, specific bench oils). Oiling should be repeated every 6-12 months depending on the intensity of use. Alternatively, for intensive professional use, transparent polyurethane varnishes can be applied, which offer greater mechanical resistance but alter the natural appearance of the wood.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eAre the 4 (short) bench dogs sufficient?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor standard use, yes. 4 (short) allow for clamping typical workpieces (lengths up to the limit of the bench). For very specific pieces or work requiring multiple clamping positions, additional dogs are available in the Bernardo accessories catalog.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench dogs are inserted into the Ø 19 mm holes in the top and are locked by the pressure of the vises. To optimize clamping, the following are available: short dogs (for thin pieces), long dogs (for tall pieces), special dogs with iron jaws (for metal pieces), quick-release lever dogs (for frequent workpiece changes). All dogs are compatible with the standard Ø 19 mm holes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I also use the workbench for metalworking?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but with caution. The workbench is designed for woodworking: for use with metal (e.g., filing, manual sawing of light profiles) it is manageable, but for work that generates sparks (welding) or requires a lot of force (drilling heavy metals), the wooden top can be damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor mixed wood + metal working, a dedicated area on the bench with a sacrificial metal top (steel sheet) above the wooden top is recommended to protect it. For exclusively metalworking, consider mechanic's benches with a dedicated steel top. For blacksmiths with mixed needs, consider special configurations with a metal top inserted into the wooden bench (custom fabrication).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the working height adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe working height of 845 mm is fixed, sized for average height operators (170-180 cm) standing. The adjustable threaded rods in the pedestal allow for compensation of floor irregularities (±20 mm) but not adjustment of the useful height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor non-standard height operators (under 165 cm or over 190 cm) or for prolonged seated use, a riser platform or adjustable stool are common accessories. For educational environments with users of different heights, the presence of modular platforms is recommended. Benches with hydraulic or pneumatic height adjustment are available in the Bernardo catalog as dedicated professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693288198472,"sku":"14-2274","price":475.81,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_falegname_WB_2000_Hobby_con_morse_integrate_e_ganci_rotondi.jpg?v=1755704715"},{"product_id":"banchi-da-falegname-wb-2100-profi","title":"Bernardo WB 2100 Profi Professional Workbench – steamed solid red beech, dimensions 2,120 × 760 mm, working height 860 mm, weight 73 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 2100 Profi workbench is made of solid steamed red beech with overall dimensions of 2,120 × 760 mm. Panel thickness 40 mm, working height 860 mm. Equipped with front and rear vises with trapezoidal threaded spindles, 4 round bench dogs included, Ø 19 mm holes for dog insertion. Front\/rear vise opening width 210 \/ 180 mm. Weight 73 kg. Suitable for professional carpentry workshops, vocational school training labs, furniture restorers, artisanal custom furniture production. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial:\u003c\/strong\u003e Solid steamed red beech wood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOverall dimensions (with vises):\u003c\/strong\u003e 2,120 × 760 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePanel thickness:\u003c\/strong\u003e 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 860 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVises:\u003c\/strong\u003e Front and rear with trapezoidal threaded spindle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBench dogs included:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 (2 short + 2 long)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBench dog holes:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 19 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 73 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WB 2100 Profi and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 2100 Profi is a solid beech wood workbench for manual woodworking. Overall dimensions 2,120 × 760 mm, working height 860 mm (ergonomic standard for standing operators). Construction features: 40 mm thick solid beech wood panels, reinforced structure with adjustable threaded rods in the base to compensate for floor irregularities, galvanized beech bolts for deformation resistance caused by humidity. The WB 2100 Profi model is the top of the range with professional features: steamed red beech (steam-treated wood for superior dimensional stability and resistance to deformation in humid environments), oiled surface for lasting protection, rounded details for ergonomics, provision for EB 2 under-bench cabinets (accessory available separately). Drawers and decorative elements included in standard delivery. Suitable for professional carpentry workshops, vocational school training labs for woodworking arts, furniture restorers, custom artisanal furniture production. In Krollit customers' workshops, WB benches are chosen by wood hobbyists, artisanal carpentry shops, vocational schools, and home DIY labs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB workbench range is organized into 3 models: WB 1500 Hobby (1,500 mm, 43 kg) compact for home workshop; WB 2000 Hobby (2,000 mm, 52 kg) standard for advanced hobbyists with adequate space; WB 2100 Profi (2,120 mm, 73 kg) professional in steamed red beech with oiled surface, pre-arranged for under-bench cabinets. \n\nThe WB 2100 Profi is the top of the range for professional use: steamed red beech wood (vs standard untreated beech of Hobby models), oiled surface (vs raw top of Hobby models), panel thickness 40 mm (vs 30 mm of Hobby models), wider vises (210\/180 mm vs 140\/140 mm of Hobby models), pre-drilled holes on the front for additional clamping, drawers and decorations included. For professional carpentry workshops, training labs, restorers. For hobbyists, the WB 1500 Hobby or WB 2000 Hobby models are significantly more economical and sized for non-intensive daily use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics and Krollit support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). The WB 2100 Profi workbench is shipped on a pallet, weight 73 kg. Assembly takes 30-60 minutes with standard hand tools (wrenches, screwdrivers). Additional bench dogs, replacement accessories (vises, spindles, shelves) original Bernardo available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer assistance available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the WB 2100 Profi for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate wood hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop-of-the-range professional bench: for standard hobby use it may be oversized. Consider the more economical WB 1500 Hobby or WB 2000 Hobby.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional carpentry workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteamed red beech for dimensional stability, oiled surface, 40 mm thickness, 210\/180 mm vises. Suitable for intensive daily use. Pre-arranged for EB 2 under-bench cabinets.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTraining lab \/ vocational school\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRobustness for student use, ergonomics (rounded corners), drawers and decorative elements included. For educational environments that require professional equipment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e occasional hobby use (oversized; consider the more economical WB 1500 Hobby or WB 2000 Hobby); very humid environments without ventilation (even steamed beech can deform in extreme conditions); processing with heavy machinery that generates excessive vibrations (consider specific benches for machines with dedicated bases).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaterial\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWood type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid steamed red beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePanel thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSurface treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOiled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (with vises)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2,120 × 760 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without vises\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,900 × 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e860 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eClamping system\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVises\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront and rear with trapezoidal threaded spindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVise opening width (front \/ rear)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210 \/ 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound bench dogs included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (2 short + 2 long)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole drilling for dogs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWeight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 73 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo WB 2100 Profi workbench\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 short round bench dogs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 long round bench dogs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrawers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDecorative elements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and assembly manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eDoes the bench arrive assembled or disassembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bench is shipped disassembled to optimize transport volume. Assembly takes 30-60 minutes with standard hand tools (wrenches, screwdrivers, possibly a rubber mallet for some joints). Assembly instructions are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable threaded rods in the base allow compensation for floor irregularities after assembly (±20 mm): important for stability during work with hammers or lateral pressures on the vises. For professional assembly, Krollit can provide telephone guidance during installation. For commercial environments requiring professional installation, contact Krollit sales.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the top already painted or oiled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor Hobby models, the top is untreated (raw wood) to allow customization with oils, varnishes, or protective waxes chosen by the user. For the WB 2100 Profi model, the top is factory-oiled (food-grade compatible wood oil).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecommended oil for workbench tops: specific wood oils with resistance to moisture and stains (e.g., boiled linseed oil, hard oil, specific workbench oils). Oiling should be repeated every 6-12 months depending on the intensity of use. Alternatively, for intensive professional use, transparent polyurethane varnishes can be applied, offering greater mechanical resistance but altering the natural appearance of the wood.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eAre the 4 (2 short + 2 long) bench dogs sufficient?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor standard use, yes. 4 (2 short + 2 long) allow clamping of typical workpieces (lengths up to the bench limit). For very specific pieces or work with multiple clamping positions, additional dogs are available in the Bernardo accessories catalog.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench dogs are inserted into the Ø 19 mm holes in the top and locked by the pressure of the vises. To optimize clamping, the following are available: short dogs (for thin pieces), long dogs (for tall pieces), special dogs with iron jaws (for metal pieces), quick-release lever dogs (for frequent workpiece changes). All dogs are compatible with the standard Ø 19 mm hole drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eCan I also use the bench for metalworking?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but with caution. The bench is designed for woodworking: for use with metal (e.g., filing, manual sawing of light profiles) it is manageable, but for work that generates sparks (welding) or requires a lot of force (drilling heavy metals), the wooden top can be damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor mixed wood + metal work, a dedicated area on the bench with a sacrificial metal top (steel sheet) over the wooden top is recommended to protect it. For exclusively metal work, consider machinist benches with a dedicated steel top. For blacksmiths with mixed needs, consider special configurations with a metal top inserted into the wooden bench (custom work).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\u003csummary\u003eIs the working height adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe working height of 860 mm is fixed, sized for average height operators (170-180 cm) standing. The adjustable threaded rods in the base allow compensation for floor irregularities (±20 mm) but not adjustment of the usable height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor non-standard height operators (below 165 cm or above 190 cm) or for prolonged seated use, a raised platform or adjustable stool are common accessories. For educational environments with users of different heights, modular platforms are recommended. Benches with hydraulic or pneumatic height adjustment are available in the Bernardo catalog as dedicated professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693292917064,"sku":"14-2276","price":1056.54,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_WB_2100_Profi_in_faggio_massiccio_con_ganci_e_cassetti.jpg?v=1755705344"},{"product_id":"banco-lavoro-pieghevole-guede-gwb-100-50f","title":"Guede workbench folding Güde GWB 100\/50F","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Güde GWB 100\/50F Folding Workbench is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop: Special multi-layered wood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop dimensions (W x D): 1010 x 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 840 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum load capacity: 150 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStructure: Steel tubing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Güde GWB 100\/50F Folding Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GWB 100\/50F Folding Workbench is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Güde GWB 100\/50F Folding Workbench is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Güde GWB 100\/50F Folding Workbench is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GWB 100\/50F folding workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpecial multi-layered wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1010 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e840 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel tubing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (W x D x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1093 x 510 x 840 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReady assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the Güde GWB 100\/50F Folding Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series goes over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer assistance in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52207234449736,"sku":"17936","price":108.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_pieghevole_G_de_GWB_100_50F_con_piano_rinforzato.webp?v=1766046285"},{"product_id":"carrelli-portautensili-guede-gw-12s","title":"Guede workbench tool holder with Güde GW 12S workbench","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 12S workbench with tool holder is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 1050 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable depth: 480 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable thickness: 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 1000 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable material: Rubber wood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of drawers: 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Güde GW 12S workbench with tool holder and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 12S workbench with tool holder is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Güde range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 12S workbench with tool holder is part of the Güde workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Güde range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Güde catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance in selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Güde GW 12S workbench with tool holder for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 12s workbench with tool holder is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors and accessories for tool organization and preparation of work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide drilling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 x 38 mm mesh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubber wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x D x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1125 x 480 x 1000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity per drawer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal maximum load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 in PVC (2 with brakes)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the Güde GW 12S workbench with tool holder support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels \"P-1200\" have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series goes over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52207269806408,"sku":"39140","price":549.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_portautensili_con_banco_da_lavoro_G_de_GW_12S.webp?v=1766047798"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-modulo-angolare-guede-gw-600e","title":"Guede Workbench Guede GW 600E Eco Line workbench corner module","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Corner workbench module Güde GW 600E Eco Line is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop material: Solid rubberwood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum load capacity: 200 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConnection point: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTotal length: 1095 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Güde GW 600E Eco Line Corner Workbench Module and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 600E Eco Line Corner Workbench Module is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 600E Eco Line Corner Workbench Module is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Güde GW 600E Eco Line Corner Workbench Module is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 600E Eco Line corner workbench module is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid rubberwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1095 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1095 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLevelling feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConnection point\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTo be assembled, 2-part top\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the load capacity of the Güde GW 600E Eco Line Corner Workbench Module?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series reaches over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the codes: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52207368175944,"sku":"40469","price":190.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Modulo_angolare_banco_da_lavoro_G_de_GW_600E_Eco_Line.webp?v=1766048833"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-2t","title":"Guede workbench Guede GW 2T Eco Line","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 2T Eco Line workbench is a workbench for professional use available at Krollit, official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop material: Solid rubberwood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax workbench capacity: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Güde GW 2T Eco Line Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 2T Eco Line workbench is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Güde range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 2T Eco Line workbench is part of the Güde workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Güde range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Güde catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Güde GW 2T Eco Line Workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 2T Eco Line workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisanal laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for organizing tools and preparing work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid rubberwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax workbench capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTo be assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the Güde GW 2T Eco Line Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go beyond 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52207382659400,"sku":"40470","price":234.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_GW_2T_Eco_Line_con_ante_e_cassetto.webp?v=1766049232"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-3-1","title":"Guede workbench GW 3\/1 Eco Line","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede workbench Güde GW 3\/1 Eco Line is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 1200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable material: Solid rubberwood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax workbench capacity: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Güde GW 3\/1 Eco Line workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 3\/1 Eco Line workbench is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede workbench Güde GW 3\/1 Eco Line is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer service available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Güde GW 3\/1 Eco Line workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GW 3\/1 Eco Line workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid rubberwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax workbench capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (3 small + 1 large)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTo be assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the capacity of the Güde GW 3\/1 Eco Line workbench?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of combining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts available. Italian customer service available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52207559049544,"sku":"40471","price":265.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_GW_3_1_Eco_Line_con_cassetti_e_anta.webp?v=1766050803"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-2-2","title":"Guede Workbench GW 2\/2","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench GW 2\/2 is a professional workbench available from Krollit, the official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop material: Rubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum workbench load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 2\/2 Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 2\/2 Workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Workbench GW 2\/2 is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GW 2\/2 Workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 2\/2 workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional Guede benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 115 x 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e465 x 390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum workbench load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKey lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 2\/2 Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e“P-1200” models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52213168374088,"sku":"40472","price":236.19,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_GW_2_2_300_kg_con_cassetti_e_ante.jpg?v=1777727535"},{"product_id":"banco-da-lavoro-guede-gw-5-1-300-kg-con-5-cassetti","title":"Guede workbench GW 5\/1","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 5\/1 Workbench is a professional-grade workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop material: Rubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum workbench load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 5\/1 Workbench and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 5\/1 Workbench is a professional-grade workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 5\/1 Workbench is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GW 5\/1 Workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 5\/1 workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 115 x 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum workbench load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking mechanism\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKey lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 5\/1 Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series can exceed 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBase models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorking surface material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorking surface dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian-speaking customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52213230960968,"sku":"40473","price":241.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_Workbench_GW_5_1_con_5_cassetti.webp?v=1766139524"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-8s","title":"Guede workbench GW 8S","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench GW 8S is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop material: Rubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax workbench load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 8S Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 8S Workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Workbench GW 8S is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the GW 8S Workbench is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 8S workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety tabletop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional Guede benches are sized for continuous use; for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 115 x 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax workbench load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015 Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 8S Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts available. Customer assistance in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52214163603784,"sku":"40474","price":283.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_GW_8S_con_8_cassetti_blu_RAL_5015.webp?v=1766143231"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-6-1-xl","title":"Guede Workbench GW 6\/1 XL","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench GW 6\/1 XL is a workbench for professional use available at Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1709 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop material: Rubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum workbench load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 6\/1 XL Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 6\/1 XL Workbench is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench GW 6\/1 XL is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the GW 6\/1 XL Workbench is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 6\/1 XL workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1709 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 115 x 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor dimensions (W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e465 x 390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum workbench load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisassembled – tabletop in two parts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the load capacity of the GW 6\/1 XL Workbench?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series goes beyond 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52214168289608,"sku":"40480","price":324.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_GW_6_1_XL_con_piano_extra-large.webp?v=1766143438"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-6-2-xl","title":"Guede workbench GW 6\/2 XL","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 6\/2 XL Workbench is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 1709 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop material: Rubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum workbench load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 6\/2 XL Workbench and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 6\/2 XL Workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 6\/2 XL Workbench is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the GW 6\/2 XL Workbench is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 6\/2 XL workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisanal laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are designed for continuous use; for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1709 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 115 x 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor dimensions (W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e465 x 390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum workbench load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisassembled – top in two parts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 6\/2 XL Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series can reach over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52214256566600,"sku":"40481","price":334.82,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_GW_6_2_XL_300_kg_con_6_cassetti_e_2_ante.jpg?v=1777726064"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-1-1-s","title":"Guede GW 1\/1 S Workbench","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench GW 1\/1 S is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 – 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable material: Rubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax workbench load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 1\/1 S Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 1\/1 S Workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 1\/1 S Workbench is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GW 1\/1 S Workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 1\/1 S workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 – 885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubberwood (solid wood)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 x 115 x 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor dimensions (W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e465 x 390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax workbench load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 1\/1 S Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian-speaking customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52214267150664,"sku":"40482","price":177.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_GW_1_1_S_compatto_con_cassetto_e_anta.webp?v=1766144234"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-gw-5-inox","title":"Guede workbench tool holder with GW 5 INOX bench","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 5 INOX tool trolley with workbench is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 668 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable depth: 493 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 905 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSteel standard: X6Cr17 – EN 14016\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum workbench load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 5 INOX tool trolley with workbench and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 5 INOX tool trolley with workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 5 INOX tool trolley with workbench is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GW 5 INOX tool trolley with workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 5 INOX tool trolley with workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e493 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 + 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e668 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e905 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (height)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3×55 mm · 1×130 mm · 1×200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e535 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eX6Cr17 – EN 14016\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum workbench load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 swivel (2 with brake)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 5 INOX tool trolley with workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series reaches over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52215457284424,"sku":"40486","price":300.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_GW_5_INOX_in_acciaio_inox_con_ruote.webp?v=1766154068"},{"product_id":"carrelli-portautensili-guede-gw-5-1-inox","title":"Guede Workbench Tool Holder with GW 5\/1 INOX Bench","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 5\/1 INOX workbench with tool holder is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSteel Standard: X6Cr17 – EN 14016\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 1073 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable depth: 493 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable thickness: 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 905 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum load: 300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 5\/1 INOX workbench with tool holder and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 5\/1 INOX workbench with tool holder is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 5\/1 INOX workbench with tool holder is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GW 5\/1 INOX workbench with tool holder for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 5\/1 INOX workbench with tool holder is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e493 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 + 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1073 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e905 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e535 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e365 × 605 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel Standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eX6Cr17 – EN 14016\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer heights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3×55 mm · 1×130 mm · 1×200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 swivel (2 with brakes)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 5\/1 INOX workbench with tool holder support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52215657464136,"sku":"40487","price":461.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_portautensili_INOX_Guede_GW_5_1_con_banco_e_ruote.webp?v=1766154754"},{"product_id":"carrelli-officina-guede-gw-10-inox","title":"Guede workbench tool holder with GW 10 INOX bench","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 10 INOX tool trolley with workbench is a professional workbench, weighing 108 kg. Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall width: 1510 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall depth: 493 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverall height: 905 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop (L x D x T): 1435 x 493 x 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 905 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of drawers: 10 (2 modules of 5)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GW 10 INOX tool trolley with workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 10 INOX tool trolley with workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GW 10 INOX tool trolley with workbench is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance in selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GW 10 INOX tool trolley with workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GW 10 INOX tool trolley with workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1510 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e905 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop (L x D x T)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1435 x 493 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e905 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e335 mm \/ 897 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3x55\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e108 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGross weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e119 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 (2 modules of 5)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity per drawer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e493 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 + 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the GW 10 INOX tool trolley with workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is recommended for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian-speaking customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52226024341832,"sku":"40489","price":797.03,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_portautensili_G_de_GW_10_INOX_con_banco_da_lavoro_in_acciaio_inox.webp?v=1766397139"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-s-black-line","title":"Guede Workbench P 1200 S Black Line Professional","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 S Black Line professional is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop: Solid beech\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 650 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame section: 40 × 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 1200 S Black Line professional workbench and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 S Black Line professional workbench is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 S Black Line professional is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the P 1200 S Black Line professional workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 S Black Line professional workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use; for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax load capacity (worktop)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEuropean Union\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the P 1200 S Black Line professional workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series can reach over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is recommended for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian-speaking customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52226126020936,"sku":"40837","price":230.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_P_1200_S_Black_Line_con_piano_in_faggio_massello.webp?v=1766397992"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-slt-black-line","title":"Guede workbench P 1200 SLT Black Line with drawers","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SLT Black Line with drawers is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop: Solid beech\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 650 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame section: 40 × 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 1200 SLT Black Line Workbench with drawers and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 SLT Black Line Workbench with drawers is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SLT Black Line with drawers is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the P 1200 SLT Black Line Workbench with drawers for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 SLT black line workbench with drawers is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional Guede workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. load capacity of top\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer extraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull, on ball guides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 removable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEuropean Union\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dividers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded and adjustable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the P 1200 SLT Black Line Workbench with drawers support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go beyond 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBase models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is recommended for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52226449965384,"sku":"40838","price":499.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_P_1200_SLT_Black_Line_con_cassetti_e_armadio.webp?v=1766401422"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-ss-black-line","title":"Guede workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers is a professional-grade workbench available from Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop: Solid Beech\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 650 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame section: 40 × 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers is a professional-grade workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional Güde workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid Beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax worktop load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions (H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 × 85 mm · 2 × 165 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEuropean Union\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dividers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded and adjustable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the Workbench P 1200 SS Black Line with 6 drawers support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eP-1200 models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical specifications for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is recommended for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52226475557192,"sku":"40839","price":578.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_P_1200_SS_Black_Line_con_doppio_modulo_cassetti.webp?v=1766401634"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-s","title":"Guede P 1200 S Professional Workbench 400 kg","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede P 1200 S professional workbench 400 kg is a workbench for professional use available from Krollit, the official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop: High-density panel with beech coating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame section: 40 × 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 1200 S professional workbench 400 kg and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 S professional workbench 400 kg is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede P 1200 S professional workbench 400 kg is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the P 1200 S professional workbench 400 kg for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 S professional workbench 400 kg is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Professional Güde benches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-density panel with beech coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax worktop capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforcements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 × 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015 Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the P 1200 S professional workbench 400 kg support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series reaches over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52226813198664,"sku":"40920","price":168.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_P_1200_S_blu_RAL_5015.webp?v=1766404397"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-t","title":"Guede P 1200 T workbench with lockable cabinet","description":"\u003cp\u003eGüde Workbench Güde P 1200 T with lockable cabinet is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop: High-density panel covered in beech\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame section: 40 × 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Güde P 1200 T Workbench with lockable cabinet and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde P 1200 T Workbench with lockable cabinet is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Güde range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde P 1200 T Workbench with lockable cabinet is part of the Güde workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Güde range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Güde catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Güde P 1200 T Workbench with lockable cabinet for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde P 1200 T workbench with lockable cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-density panel covered in beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompatibility and material\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforcements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 × 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 (1 open compartment + 2 closed compartments)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the Güde P 1200 T Workbench with lockable cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e“P-1200” models have a load capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series can exceed 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52227738042696,"sku":"40922","price":355.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_P_1200_T_con_armadio_chiudibile.webp?v=1766412126"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-tt","title":"Guede Workbench P 1200 TT with Double Cabinet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede P 1200 TT workbench with double cabinet is a professional workbench available from Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop: High-density panel with beech coating\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 1200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame section: 40 × 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 1200 TT Workbench with double cabinet and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 TT Workbench with double cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede P 1200 TT Workbench with double cabinet is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the P 1200 TT Workbench with double cabinet for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 TT workbench with double cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-density panel with beech coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax load capacity worktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompatibility and material\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforcements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 × 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (removable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the P 1200 TT Workbench with double cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series goes beyond 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52227742073160,"sku":"40924","price":393.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_P_1200_TT_con_doppio_armadio_chiudibile.webp?v=1766412272"},{"product_id":"carrelli-officina-guede-gwb-05","title":"Guede GWB 05 workbench with tool cabinet","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede tool trolley GWB 05 with workbench is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame material: Powder-coated steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTop thickness: 25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTop width: 1000 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTop depth: 500 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 980 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax capacity: 400 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GWB 05 tool trolley with workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GWB 05 tool trolley with workbench is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede tool trolley GWB 05 with workbench is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GWB 05 tool trolley with workbench for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GWB 05 tool trolley with workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety top for assembly, repair and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJoinery and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors and accessories for tool organization and preparation of work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions (L×D×H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 × 500 × 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlued plywood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePerforated panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEuro 10×10 mm, pitch 38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015 · Grey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 swivel with brake + 2 fixed Ø 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat capacity does the GWB 05 tool trolley with workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series reaches over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Top dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts available. Italian customer support available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52227867345224,"sku":"40925","price":481.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Carrello_officina_G_de_GWB_05_con_banco_da_lavoro.webp?v=1766413138"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-sl","title":"Guede Workbench P 1200 SL","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SL is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame: 40 x 40 mm tubular steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReinforcements: 30 x 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 1200 SL Workbench and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 SL Workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SL is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the P 1200 SL Workbench for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe p 1200 sl workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisanal laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use; for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTabletop, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLower drawer dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 520 x 85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper drawer dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 520 x 165 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax tabletop load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall dimensions (L x D x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 x 600 x 850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 x 40 mm tubular steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforcements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 (2 lower + 1 upper)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 removable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015 Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7001 Grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the P 1200 SL Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical specifications for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is recommended for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52233842065736,"sku":"40926","price":400.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_P_1200_SL_professionale_con_piano_in_faggio.webp?v=1766487507"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-slt","title":"Guede Workbench P 1200 SLT","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SLT is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame: 40 x 40 mm tubular steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReinforcements: 30 x 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 1200 SLT workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 SLT Workbench is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Workbench P 1200 SLT is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer service for selection support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the P 1200 SLT Workbench for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe p 1200 slt workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for organizing tools and preparing work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax tabletop load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal dimensions (L x D x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 x 600 x 850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 x 40 mm tubular steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforcements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 removable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 (2 x 85 mm, 1 x 165 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoors\/drawers color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the P 1200 SLT Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical specifications for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian-speaking customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52234659627336,"sku":"40928","price":452.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_P_1200_SLT_con_vano_chiuso_e_piano_in_faggio.webp?v=1766508410"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-p-1200-ss","title":"Guede Workbench P 1200 SS","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 1200 SS is a professional workbench available on Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable thickness: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame: Tubular steel 40 x 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReinforcements: 30 x 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 1200 SS Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 SS Workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Workbench P 1200 SS is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance in selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the P 1200 SS Workbench is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 1200 SS workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-proof top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVeneered beech\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTubular steel 40 x 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforcements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg each\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDividers included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat capacity does the P 1200 SS Workbench support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series goes over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts available. Italian customer support available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52249969262920,"sku":"40930","price":483.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_P_1200_SS_professionale_con_piano_in_faggio.webp?v=1767025988"},{"product_id":"banchi-lavoro-guede-1200-slt-multi","title":"Guede workbench 1200 SLT MULTI with integrated trolley","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Workbench 1200 SLT MULTI with integrated trolley is a professional workbench, weighing 55 kg. Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop width: 1190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop depth: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTabletop thickness: 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame: 40 x 40 mm tubular steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReinforcements: 30 x 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the 1200 SLT MULTI Workbench with integrated trolley and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1200 SLT MULTI Workbench with integrated trolley is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Workbench 1200 SLT MULTI with integrated trolley is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the 1200 SLT MULTI Workbench with integrated trolley for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1200 SLT MULTI workbench with integrated trolley is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional Guede benches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 × 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTrolley dimensions (W×D×H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 × 600 × 780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 x 40 mm tubular steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforcements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLower drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 × 85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper drawer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 × 165 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 kg each\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 removable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTool trolley\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDividers included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015 Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer\/door color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7001 Grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the 1200 SLT MULTI Workbench with integrated trolley support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Max load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels \"P-1200\" have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is recommended for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Tabletop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Guede spare parts available. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52252575236424,"sku":"40932","price":582.03,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_Guede_1200_SLT_MULTI_con_carrello_portautensili_integrato.webp?v=1767085402"},{"product_id":"banchetti-lavoro-guede-p-600-s","title":"Guede workbench P 600 S","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workbench P 600 S is a professional workbench available from Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop width: 570 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop depth: 590 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorktop thickness: 25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of drawers: 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmall drawers: 2 × 520 × 100 × 430 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the P 600 S Workbench and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 600 S Workbench is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Workbench P 600 S is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer service for selection support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the P 600 S Workbench for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe p 600 s workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisanal laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax worktop load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 520 × 100 × 430 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLarge drawer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 × 520 × 180 × 430 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg each\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDividers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded (2 yes, 1 no)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the load capacity of the P 600 S Workbench?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series exceed 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel worktop; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel worktop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of aligning multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian-speaking customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52252592341320,"sku":"40974","price":312.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_G_de_P_600_S_in_acciaio_con_3_cassetti.webp?v=1767087571"},{"product_id":"banchetti-lavoro-guede-roller-p-600-s","title":"Guede P 600 S Mobile Workbench","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Mobile Workbench P 600 S is a workbench for professional use, available from Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 570 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable depth: 590 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable thickness: 25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of drawers: 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmall drawers: 2 × 520 × 100 × 430 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Mobile Workbench P 600 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Mobile Workbench P 600 S is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Mobile Workbench P 600 S is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Mobile Workbench P 600 S for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe P 600 S mobile workbench is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax load on table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 520 × 100 × 430 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLarge drawer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 × 520 × 180 × 430 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg each\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDividers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded (2 yes, 1 no)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 swivel with brake + 2 fixed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the Mobile Workbench P 600 S support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52252600369480,"sku":"40976","price":331.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Banco_da_lavoro_mobile_G_de_Roller_P_600_S_con_ruote.webp?v=1767087851"},{"product_id":"armadi-officina-guede-gws","title":"Guede Workbench Workshop cabinet GWS","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede GWS Workshop Cabinet is a professional workbench available on Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D): 845 × 325 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 30 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWidth: 850 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDepth: 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GWS Workshop Cabinet and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GWS Workshop Cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GWS Workshop Cabinet is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GWS Workshop Cabinet for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GWS workshop cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e845 × 325 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisassembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the capacity of the GWS Workshop Cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series can reach over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical specifications for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of combining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian-speaking customer support is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52252767256904,"sku":"40478","price":170.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_officina_G_de_GWS_con_2_ante_e_4_ripiani.webp?v=1767094169"},{"product_id":"armadi-officina-guede-type-a","title":"Guede Workbench Workshop cabinet TYPE A","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workshop Cabinet TYPE A is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 1\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWidth: 380 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDepth: 375 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight: 1,930 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE A Workshop Cabinet and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE A Workshop Cabinet is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Workshop Cabinet TYPE A is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer service for selection support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer service available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TYPE A Workshop Cabinet for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE A workshop cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompatibility and material\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e375 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the TYPE A workshop cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series can reach over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian customer service is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52252771713352,"sku":"40677","price":245.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_officina_G_de_TYPE_A_in_acciaio_con_anta_singola.webp?v=1767094608"},{"product_id":"armadi-officina-guede-type-b","title":"Guede Workbench Workshop cabinet TYPE B","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Workshop Cabinet TYPE B is a professional workbench available from Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D): 780 × 380 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWidth: 790 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDepth: 380 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE B Workshop Cabinet and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE B Workshop Cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Workshop Cabinet TYPE B is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TYPE B Workshop Cabinet for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Type B workshop cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-proof top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for organizing tools and preparing work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 × 380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e790 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompatibility and material\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015 Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7001 Grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does Workshop Cabinet TYPE B support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Top dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52253602578760,"sku":"40678","price":318.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_officina_G_de_TYPE_B_a_due_ante_in_acciaio.webp?v=1767108846"},{"product_id":"armadi-officina-guede-type-c","title":"Guede Workbench Workshop cabinet TYPE C","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede TYPE C Workshop Cabinet is a professional workbench available on Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWidth: 1,100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDepth: 380 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight: 1,930 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE C Workshop Cabinet and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE C Workshop Cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede TYPE C Workshop Cabinet is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TYPE C Workshop Cabinet for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe type c workshop cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and preparation of work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompatibility and material\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the TYPE C Workshop Cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically from 200 to 1,000 kg for professional benches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Top dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52253615915336,"sku":"40679","price":393.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_officina_G_de_TYPE_C_a_due_ante_in_acciaio.webp?v=1767109154"},{"product_id":"armadi-armadio-porta-attrezzi-guede-type-universal","title":"Guede Workbench Tool Cabinet TYPE UNIVERSAL","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Tool Cabinet TYPE UNIVERSAL is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D): 780 x 380 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of drawers: 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrawer width: 780 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrawer capacity: 40 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE UNIVERSAL Tool Cabinet and for what purpose?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE UNIVERSAL Tool Cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede TYPE UNIVERSAL Tool Cabinet fits into the range of Guede workbenches, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TYPE UNIVERSAL Tool Cabinet for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE UNIVERSAL tool cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-proof top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular bench with drawers, doors, and accessories for organizing tools and preparing work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Guede professional benches are sized for continuous use; for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 x 380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e790 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrawer capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking mechanism\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlready assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the TYPE UNIVERSAL Tool Cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series exceed 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular benches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer assistance in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52272947659080,"sku":"40685","price":462.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_porta_attrezzi_Guede_TYPE_UNIVERSAL_con_cassetti_e_pannello_forato.png?v=1767627863"},{"product_id":"armadi-armadio-verticale-estraibile-guede-vas-t02","title":"Guede Workbench Pull-Out Vertical Cabinet VAS T02","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Vertical Extendable Cabinet VAS T02 is a professional workbench available from Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of vertical panels: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePanel dimensions (D x H): 500 x 1700 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of side compartments: 5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHole matrix: 38 x 38 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHole drilling: 10 x 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the VAS T02 Vertical Extendable Cabinet and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe VAS T02 Vertical Extendable Cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Vertical Extendable Cabinet VAS T02 is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer service available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the VAS T02 Vertical Extendable Cabinet for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe VAS T02 vertical extendable cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant surface for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are designed for continuous use; for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole matrix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 x 38 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole drilling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 x 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePanel dimensions (D x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 x 1700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 x 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of vertical panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of side compartments\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlready assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlue RAL 5015\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey RAL 7001\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the VAS T02 Vertical Extendable Cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; the GW Heavy Duty series goes over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Panel dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Italian customer service is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52273040621896,"sku":"40716","price":877.03,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_verticale_estraibile_Guede_VAS_T02_con_pannelli_forati.png?v=1767629378"},{"product_id":"armadi-armadio-porta-attrezzi-guede-type-b-black-line","title":"Guede Workbench Tool Cabinet TYPE B Black Line","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Tool Cabinet TYPE B Black Line is a workbench for professional use available at Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D): 780 x 380 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLocking: Cylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWidth: 790 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE B Black Line Tool Cabinet and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE B Black Line Tool Cabinet is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Tool Cabinet TYPE B Black Line is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TYPE B Black Line Tool Cabinet for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe type b black line tool cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety worktop for assembly, repair and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional domestic use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional güde workbenches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 x 380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e790 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack Line – Profi\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat capacity does the TYPE B Black Line Tool Cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical data sheet for the abbreviations: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts available. Customer assistance in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52273050943816,"sku":"40840","price":320.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_porta_attrezzi_Guede_TYPE_B_Black_Line_in_acciaio_nero.png?v=1767629684"},{"product_id":"armadi-armadio-porta-attrezzi-guede-type-c-black-line","title":"Guede Workbench Tool Cabinet TYPE C Black Line","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Tool cabinet TYPE C Black Line is a professional workbench available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLocking: Cylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWidth: 1100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDepth: 380 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE C Black Line tool cabinet and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE C Black Line tool cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Tool cabinet TYPE C Black Line is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TYPE C Black Line tool cabinet for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Type C Black Line tool cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with accident-prevention top for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are dimensioned for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlready assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack Line – Profi\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat capacity does the TYPE C Black Line tool cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series go over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Table dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts available. Italian-speaking customer support available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52273064902984,"sku":"40841","price":402.01,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_porta_attrezzi_Guede_TYPE_C_Black_Line_in_acciaio_nero.png?v=1767629931"},{"product_id":"armadi-armadio-porta-attrezzi-guede-type-bg-black-line","title":"Guede Workbench Tool Cabinet TYPE BG Black Line","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Guede TYPE BG Black Line Tool Cabinet is a workbench for professional use available on Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D): 780 x 580 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLocking system: Cylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWidth: 780 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE BG Black Line Tool Cabinet and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE BG Black Line Tool Cabinet is a workbench for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede TYPE BG Black Line Tool Cabinet is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping of machines in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TYPE BG Black Line Tool Cabinet for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE BG Black Line tool cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisanal laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with safety-compliant surface for assembly, repair, and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors, and accessories for tool organization and work preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: Güde professional workbenches are designed for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 x 580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlready assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack Line – Profi\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEU\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat load capacity does the TYPE BG Black Line Tool Cabinet support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Maximum load capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series can reach over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard workbenches have steel tops; \"Inox\" models have stainless steel tops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is recommended for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts available. Customer assistance in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52273239195976,"sku":"40842","price":408.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_porta_attrezzi_Guede_TYPE_BG_Black_Line_profondo_in_acciaio_nero.png?v=1767631814"},{"product_id":"armadi-armadio-porta-attrezzi-guede-type-b1","title":"Guede Workbench Tool Cabinet TYPE B1","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Tool cabinet TYPE B1 is a professional workbench available from Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of shelves: 1\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D): 775 x 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShelf capacity: 50 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of doors: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLocking system: Cylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBody color: RAL 5015 Blue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TYPE B1 Tool Cabinet and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE B1 Tool Cabinet is a professional workbench distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Tool Cabinet TYPE B1 is part of the Guede workbench range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TYPE B1 Tool Cabinet is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TYPE B1 tool cabinet is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and craft laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: stable workstation with anti-accident top for assembly, repair and maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: modular workbench with drawers, doors and accessories for tool organization and preparation of work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional home use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional Güde benches are sized for continuous use: for home garages, consider compact models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf dimensions (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e775 x 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder lock, double locking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivery status\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlready assembled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 5015 Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7001 Gray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the capacity of the TYPE B1 Tool Cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Max. capacity\" in the technical table: typically 200 to 1,000 kg for professional workbenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"P-1200\" models have a capacity of 200-300 kg; GW Heavy Duty series can reach over 500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers and doors does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBasic models have 2-3 drawers; \"S\/SS\/T\/TT\/SLT\" configurations indicate combinations of drawers and doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the technical sheet for the acronyms: \"S\" = single, \"SS\" = double, \"T\" = top, \"TT\" = double top, \"SLT\" = top with side drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop material?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard benches have a steel top; \"Inox\" models have a stainless steel top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel is suitable for environments with liquids or corrosive substances; standard steel is more economical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWorktop dimensions?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Worktop dimensions\" in the table: typically 1,200-2,000 mm in width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor modular workbenches, check the possibility of joining multiple modules to extend the workstation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSpare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Güde spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit has been an official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52273274749256,"sku":"40936","price":193.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Armadio_porta_attrezzi_Guede_TYPE_B1_compatto_in_acciaio.png?v=1767632770"}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/collections\/IMG-20250505-WA0014.jpg?v=1753689753","url":"https:\/\/www.krollit.com\/collections\/bench-from-lavoro-in-wood.oembed","provider":"Krollit","version":"1.0","type":"link"}